blob: 59f416ebf0ff3587bfbcc052fbb0f0227a3c6f08 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000177static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 if (SI1 == SI2)
179 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
182 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
183 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
184 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
185 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000186 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000188 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
189 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
190 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000191 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
192 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
193 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
194 return false;
195 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000196
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000197 return true;
198}
199
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000200/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
201/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
202/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000203static bool
204isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
205 Instruction *Cond,
206 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000209 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
210
211 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000213 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
214 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
215 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
216 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000217 if (!Ci2)
218 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
220 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
221 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
222 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
223 return false;
224
225 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
226 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000227 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
229 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
230 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000231 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
232 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000233 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000234 return false;
235 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
236 }
237 return true;
238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
241/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
242/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
243/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
245 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000246 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
247 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000249 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000250 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000251 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000252}
253
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000254/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
255/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
256/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000257/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000258static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000260 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000261 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000263}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000264
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000265/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
266/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000267/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
268/// which works well enough for us.
269///
270/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000271/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
272/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
273/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
274/// set and true is returned.
275///
276/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
277/// Select whose cost is 2.
278///
279/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
280/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
281/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000282static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000283 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000284 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000285 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
286 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000287 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
288 // so limit the recursion depth.
289 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
290 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
291 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
292 return false;
293
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000294 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000295 if (!I) {
296 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
297 // can be executed unconditionally.
298 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
299 if (C->canTrap())
300 return false;
301 return true;
302 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000303 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000304
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000305 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000306 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000307 if (PBB == BB)
308 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000309
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000310 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
311 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000312 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
313 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000314 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000315 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000316
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
318 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 if (!AggressiveInsts)
320 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000321
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000322 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
324 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000325
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000326 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
327 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
328 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000329 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000330 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000331
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000333
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000334 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
335 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
336 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
337 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
338 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
339 // enabled further IR optimizations.
340 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
341 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000342 return false;
343
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000344 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
345 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000346
347 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
348 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
351 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 return false;
353 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
354 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355 return true;
356}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000358/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000359/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000360static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000361 // Normal constant int.
362 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000364 return CI;
365
366 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
367 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000369
370 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
371 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
372 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
373
374 // IntToPtr const int.
375 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
376 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
377 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
378 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
379 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
380 return CI;
381 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000382 return cast<ConstantInt>(
383 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000384 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000385 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000386}
387
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000388namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
391/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
392/// structure.
393/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
394/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
395/// representing the different cases for the switch.
396/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
397/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
398/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
399/// fail.
400struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
403 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
404 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
405 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
409 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
410 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000416 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000418private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
420 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
421 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
423 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424 CompValue = NewVal;
425 return (CompValue != nullptr);
426 }
427
428 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
429 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
430 /// match depending on isEQ).
431 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
432 /// against is placed in CompValue.
433 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
434 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
437 ICmpInst *ICI;
438 ConstantInt *C;
439 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000440 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 return false;
442 }
443
444 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000445 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446
447 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000448 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000450 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000451
452 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
453 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
454
455 /*
456 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
457 x : BITVECTOR(64);
458 y : BITVECTOR(64);
459 z : BITVECTOR(64);
460 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
461 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
462 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
463 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000464 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
465 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
466 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000467 */
468
469 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
470 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
471 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
472 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
473 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
474 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
475 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
476
477 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
479 //
480 // mask = (1 << z)
481 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
482 //
483 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
484 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
485
486 // Pattern match a special case:
487 /*
488 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
489 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
490 );
491 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000493 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
494 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000495 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000497 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 return false;
499
500 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000501 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
503 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 UsedICmps++;
505 return true;
506 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000507 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000508
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 // Pattern match a special case:
510 /*
511 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
512 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
513 );
514 */
515 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
516 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
517 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
518 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
519 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
520 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
521 return false;
522
523 Vals.push_back(C);
524 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
525 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
526 UsedICmps++;
527 return true;
528 }
529 }
530
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 UsedICmps++;
536 Vals.push_back(C);
537 return ICI->getOperand(0);
538 }
539
540 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000541 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
542 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
544 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
545 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
546 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000547 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
548 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
550 }
551
552 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
553 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
554 // x != 0 && x != 1.
555 if (!isEQ)
556 Span = Span.inverse();
557
558 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
559 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
560 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000561 }
562
563 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000564 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000565 return false;
566
567 // Add all values from the range to the set
568 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000570
571 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000573 }
574
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000575 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
577 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
578 /// vector.
579 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000580 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000581 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
582 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000583
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
585 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000586 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000587
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000589 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000591
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000592 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000593 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000594
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
596 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
597 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000598 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
599 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
600 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
601 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000602 continue;
603 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000604
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000606 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 // Match succeed, continue the loop
608 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000609 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
612 // comparison against the same value as the others.
613 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
614 if (!Extra) {
615 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616 continue;
617 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
619 CompValue = nullptr;
620 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000621 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000622 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000624}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000625
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000626static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000627 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000628 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
629 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
630 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
631 if (BI->isConditional())
632 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000633 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
634 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000635 }
636
637 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638 if (Cond)
639 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000640}
641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000642/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000643/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000644Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000645 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000646 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
647 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
648 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000649 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
650 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
651 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000652 CV = SI->getCondition();
653 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000654 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000655 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000656 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000657 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000658 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000659
660 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000662 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
663 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000665 CV = Ptr;
666 }
667 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000668 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000669}
670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000671/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000672/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000673BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
674 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000677 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
678 ++i)
679 Cases.push_back(
680 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 return SI->getDefaultDest();
682 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000684 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000685 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000687 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
688 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000689 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690}
691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000692/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000693/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000694static void
695EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
696 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000697 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000698}
699
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000700/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000701static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000703 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
704
705 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
706 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
707 std::swap(V1, V2);
708
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709 if (V1->size() == 0)
710 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000711 if (V1->size() == 1) {
712 // Just scan V2.
713 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
714 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
715 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
716 return true;
717 }
718
719 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
720 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
721 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
722 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
723 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
724 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
725 return true;
726 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
727 ++i1;
728 else
729 ++i2;
730 }
731 return false;
732}
733
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000734/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
735/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
736/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
737/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
738/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
740 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000741 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742 if (!PredVal)
743 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000744
745 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
746 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000747 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
748 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000749
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000750 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
751 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
752
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000755 BasicBlock *PredDef =
756 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
757 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000761 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000762 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000763
764 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
765 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
766 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
767 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
768 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
769 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000770 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000771 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000772
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000773 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
774 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
775 // uncond br.
776 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
777 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000778 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000781 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000782 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000783
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
786 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000787
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000788 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
789 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000791
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000792 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
793 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000794 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
796 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000798 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000799 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000800
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000801 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
802 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000803 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000804 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
805 if (HasWeight)
806 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
807 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000808 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000809 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
810 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000811 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
812 --i;
813 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000814 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000816 Weights.pop_back();
817 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
819 SI->removeCase(i);
820 }
821 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000822 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000823 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000824 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
825 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826
827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000828 return true;
829 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000830
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000831 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
832 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000833 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
836 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000837 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000838 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000839 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
840 }
841 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000842
843 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
844 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000845 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
847 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
848 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
849 break;
850 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851
852 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000853 if (!TheRealDest)
854 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855
856 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
857 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000858 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
859 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
860 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000862 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000863
864 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000865 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000866 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867
868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000869 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
870 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871
872 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
873 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000874}
875
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000876namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000877/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
878/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
879/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
880struct ConstantIntOrdering {
881 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
882 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
883 }
884};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000885}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000886
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000887static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
888 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
889 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
890 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000891 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000892 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000893 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000894}
895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000896static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000897 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000898 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000900 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
901
902 return false;
903}
904
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000905/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
906/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
907/// metadata.
908static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
909 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000910 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 assert(MD);
912 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000913 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000915 }
916
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
918 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
919 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000920 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000921 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
922 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
923 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
924 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000925 }
926}
927
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000928/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000929static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000930 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
931 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
932 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
933 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
934 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000935 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936}
937
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000938/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
939/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000940/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
941/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000942bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
943 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000944 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000946 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
947 bool Changed = false;
948
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000949 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000951 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000952
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000953 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
954 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956
957 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
958 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
961
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000962 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
964
965 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
966 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
967 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000969
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000970 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
971 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000972 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
973 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
974
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000975 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000976 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000977 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000978 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
979 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
980 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
982 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
983 // successor's weights
984 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000987 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000988 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000989 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
991 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
992 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000993 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000994
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995 if (PredDefault == BB) {
996 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
997 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000998 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000999 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1000 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1001 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1002 else {
1003 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1004 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001005
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001006 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1007 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1009 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001010 Weights.pop_back();
1011 }
1012
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 --i;
1015 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001016 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001018 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1020 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1021 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1022 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1023 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001024
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001025 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1026 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001027 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1028 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1029 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1030 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1031 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1033 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1034 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1035 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001036 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1037 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001038 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001039 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001041 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1042 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1043 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1044 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1045 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1046 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1047 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1048 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001049 } else {
1050 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1051 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1052 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1054 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1056 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1057 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001058
1059 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1061 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001062 Weights.pop_back();
1063 }
1064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1066 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001067 --i;
1068 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001069 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001070
1071 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1072 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1075 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001076 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1077 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001078 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1079 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001080 PTIHandled.erase(
1081 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001082 }
1083
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001084 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1085 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001086 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001087 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001088 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1089 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001091 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001092 }
1093
1094 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1095 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1096 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001097 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1098 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001100 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001101 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001102 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001103 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001104 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001105 }
1106
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001107 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001108 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1109 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001110 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001111 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1112 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001113
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001114 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1115 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1116 FitWeights(Weights);
1117
1118 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1119
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001120 NewSI->setMetadata(
1121 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1122 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001123 }
1124
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001125 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001126
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001127 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1128 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1129 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001130 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001131 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1132 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001133 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001134 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001135 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001136 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1137 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001138 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001139 }
1140 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1141 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001142
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001143 Changed = true;
1144 }
1145 }
1146 return Changed;
1147}
1148
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001149// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1150// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1151// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001152static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1153 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001154 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001155 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001157 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1158 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1159 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001160 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001161 return false;
1162 }
1163 }
1164 }
1165 return true;
1166}
1167
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001168static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1169
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001170/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1171/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1172/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001173static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001174 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001175 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1176 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1177 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1178 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1179 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001180 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1181 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001182
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001183 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1184 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1185
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001186 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001187 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1188 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1189 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1190 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1191 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001192 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001193 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001194 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001195 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001196 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001197 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001198 return false;
1199
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001200 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001201
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001202 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001203 do {
1204 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1205 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1206 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1207 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001208
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001209 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1210 return Changed;
1211
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001212 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1213 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1214 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001215 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001216 if (!I2->use_empty())
1217 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001218 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001219 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1220 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1221 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1222 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1223 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1224 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1225 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1226 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1227 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1228 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001229 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001230 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001231 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001232
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001233 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1234 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001235 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1237 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1238 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1239 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001240 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001241 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001242 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001243 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001244 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245
1246 return true;
1247
1248HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001249 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1250 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001251 return Changed;
1252
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001253 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001254 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001255 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001256 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1257 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1258 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1259 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1260 continue;
1261
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001262 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1263 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1264 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1265 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001266 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001267
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001268 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001270 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001271 return Changed;
1272 }
1273 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001274
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001275 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001276 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001277 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001278 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001279 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1280 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001281 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001282 }
1283
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001284 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001285 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1286 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1287 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1288 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001289 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001290 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001291 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001292 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001293 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001294 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1295 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001296 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1297 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001298
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001299 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1300 // that determines the right value.
1301 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001302 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001303 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1304 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1305 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001306
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001307 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1308 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1309 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1310 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001311 }
1312 }
1313
1314 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001315 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1316 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001317
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001318 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001319 return true;
1320}
1321
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001322// Return true if V0 and V1 are equivalent. This handles the obvious cases
1323// where V0 == V1 and V0 and V1 are both identical instructions, but also
1324// handles loads and stores with identical operands.
1325//
1326// Because determining if two memory instructions are equivalent
1327// depends on control flow, the \c At0 and \c At1 parameters specify a
1328// location for the query. This function is essentially answering the
1329// query "If V0 were moved to At0, and V1 were moved to At1, are V0 and V1
1330// equivalent?". In practice this means checking that moving V0 to At0
1331// doesn't cross any other memory instructions.
1332static bool areValuesTriviallySame(Value *V0, BasicBlock::const_iterator At0,
1333 Value *V1, BasicBlock::const_iterator At1) {
1334 if (V0 == V1)
1335 return true;
1336
1337 // Also check for instructions that are identical but not pointer-identical.
1338 // This can include load instructions that haven't been CSE'd.
1339 if (!isa<Instruction>(V0) || !isa<Instruction>(V1))
1340 return false;
1341 const auto *I0 = cast<Instruction>(V0);
1342 const auto *I1 = cast<Instruction>(V1);
1343 if (!I0->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I1))
1344 return false;
1345
1346 if (!I0->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
1347 return true;
1348
1349 // Instructions that may read or write memory have extra restrictions. We
1350 // must ensure we don't treat %a and %b as equivalent in code such as:
1351 //
1352 // %a = load %x
1353 // store %x, 1
1354 // if (%c) {
1355 // %b = load %x
1356 // %d = add %b, 1
1357 // } else {
1358 // %d = add %a, 1
1359 // }
1360
1361 // Be conservative. We don't want to search the entire CFG between def
1362 // and use; if the def isn't in the same block as the use just bail.
1363 if (I0->getParent() != At0->getParent() ||
1364 I1->getParent() != At1->getParent())
1365 return false;
1366
1367 // Again, be super conservative. Ideally we'd be able to query AliasAnalysis
1368 // but we currently don't have that available.
1369 auto WritesMemory = [](const Instruction &I) {
1370 return I.mayReadOrWriteMemory();
1371 };
1372 if (std::any_of(std::next(I0->getIterator()), At0, WritesMemory))
1373 return false;
1374 if (std::any_of(std::next(I1->getIterator()), At1, WritesMemory))
1375 return false;
1376 return true;
1377}
1378
1379// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1380// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1381static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1382 unsigned OpIdx) {
1383 // Early exit.
1384 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1385 return true;
1386
1387 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1388 default:
1389 return true;
1390 case Instruction::Call:
1391 case Instruction::Invoke:
1392 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1393 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1394 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
1395 return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
1396 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1397 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1398 return OpIdx != 2;
1399 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1400 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1401 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1402 return OpIdx == 0;
1403 case Instruction::Alloca:
1404 return false;
1405 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1406 if (OpIdx == 0)
1407 return true;
1408 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
1409 return !It->isStructTy();
1410 }
1411}
1412
1413// All blocks in Blocks unconditionally jump to a common successor. Analyze
1414// the last non-terminator instruction in each block and return true if it would
1415// be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1416// instruction instead. Set NumPHIsRequired to the number of PHI nodes that
1417// would need to be created during sinking.
1418static bool canSinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks,
1419 unsigned &NumPHIsRequired) {
1420 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1421 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1422 if (BB->getTerminator() == &BB->front())
1423 // Block was empty.
1424 return false;
1425 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1426 }
1427
1428 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1429 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1430 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1431 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1432 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1433 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1434 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1435 return false;
1436 // Apart from loads and stores, we won't move anything that could
1437 // change memory or have sideeffects.
1438 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !isa<LoadInst>(I) &&
1439 (I->mayHaveSideEffects() || I->mayHaveSideEffects()))
1440 return false;
1441 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1442 // have no uses.
1443 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1444 return false;
1445 }
1446
1447 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1448 for (auto *I : Insts)
1449 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1450 return false;
1451
1452 // If this isn't a store, check the only user is a single PHI.
1453 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1454 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1455 if (!PNUse ||
1456 !all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) {
1457 return *I->user_begin() == PNUse;
1458 }))
1459 return false;
1460 }
1461
1462 NumPHIsRequired = 0;
1463 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1464 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1465 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1466 return false;
1467 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
1468 return areValuesTriviallySame(I->getOperand(OI), I->getIterator(),
1469 I0->getOperand(OI), I0->getIterator());
1470 };
1471 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1472 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1473 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1474 return false;
1475 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI != 0)
1476 // Don't create indirect calls!
1477 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1478 return false;
1479 ++NumPHIsRequired;
1480 }
1481 }
1482 return true;
1483}
1484
1485// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1486// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1487// into one instruction.
1488static void sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
1489 unsigned Dummy;
1490 (void)Dummy;
1491 assert(canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks, Dummy) &&
1492 "Must analyze before transforming!");
1493 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1494
1495 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1496 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1497 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1498 for (auto *BB : Blocks)
1499 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1500
1501 // We don't need to do any checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should have
1502 // done it all for us.
1503 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1504 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1505 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1506 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1507 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1508 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1509 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1510 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1511 // small mess we may make.
1512 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1513 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1514 });
1515 if (!NeedPHI) {
1516 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1517 continue;
1518 }
1519
1520 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1521 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1522 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1523 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1524 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1525 for (auto *I : Insts)
1526 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1527 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1528 }
1529
1530 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1531 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1532 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1533 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1534 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1535
1536 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1537 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1538 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1539 // instruction and nuke it.
1540 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1541 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1542 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1543 PN->eraseFromParent();
1544 }
1545
1546 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1547 for (auto *I : Insts)
1548 if (I != I0)
1549 I->eraseFromParent();
1550}
1551
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001552/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001553/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1554/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1555/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1556static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1557 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001558 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1559
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001560 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> Blocks;
1561 for (auto *BB : predecessors(BBEnd))
1562 Blocks.push_back(BB);
1563 if (Blocks.size() != 2 ||
1564 !all_of(Blocks, [](const BasicBlock *BB) {
1565 auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1566 return BI && BI->isUnconditional();
1567 }))
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001568 return false;
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001569
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001570 bool Changed = false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001571 unsigned NumPHIsToInsert;
1572 while (canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks, NumPHIsToInsert) && NumPHIsToInsert <= 1) {
1573 sinkLastInstruction(Blocks);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001574 NumSinkCommons++;
1575 Changed = true;
1576 }
1577 return Changed;
1578}
1579
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001580/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1581/// conditional block.
1582///
1583/// We are looking for code like the following:
1584/// BrBB:
1585/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1586/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1587/// ... // function).
1588/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1589/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1590/// ThenBB:
1591/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1592/// br label EndBB
1593/// EndBB:
1594/// ...
1595/// We are going to transform this into:
1596/// BrBB:
1597/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1598/// ... //
1599/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1600/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1601/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1602/// ...
1603///
1604/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1605/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001606static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1607 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001608 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1609 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001610 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001611
1612 // Volatile or atomic.
1613 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001614 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001615
1616 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1617
1618 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001619 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001620 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1621 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1622 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001623 // Skip debug info.
1624 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1625 continue;
1626 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001627
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001628 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001629 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001630 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001631
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001632 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1633 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1634 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1635 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1636 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001637 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001638 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001639 }
1640
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001641 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001642}
1643
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001644/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001645///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001646/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1647/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1648/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1649/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1650/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1651///
1652/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1653/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1654/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1655/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1656///
1657///
1658/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1659/// \code
1660/// BB:
1661/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1662/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1663/// ThenBB:
1664/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001665/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001666/// EndBB:
1667/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1668/// ...
1669/// \endcode
1670///
1671/// Into this IR:
1672/// \code
1673/// BB:
1674/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1675/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1676/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1677/// ...
1678/// \endcode
1679///
1680/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001681static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001682 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001683 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1684 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1685 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1686 return false;
1687
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001688 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1689 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1690
1691 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1692 // to swap the select operands later.
1693 bool Invert = false;
1694 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1695 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1696 Invert = true;
1697 }
1698 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1699
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001700 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1701 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1702 // - They are defined in BB, and
1703 // - They have no side effects, and
1704 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1705 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1706
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001707 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001708 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1709 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001710 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001711 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001712 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001713 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001714 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001715 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1716 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001717
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001718 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001719 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001720 ++SpeculationCost;
1721 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001722 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001723
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001724 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001725 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1726 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1727 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001728 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001729 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001730 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1731 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001732 return false;
1733
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001734 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1735 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1736 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1737
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001738 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001739 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001740 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001741 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001742 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001743 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001744 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1745
1746 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001747 }
1748 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001749
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001750 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1751 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1752 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001753 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1754 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1755 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001756 I != E; ++I)
1757 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001758 ++SpeculationCost;
1759 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001760 return false;
1761 }
1762
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001763 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1764 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001765 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001766 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001767 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1768 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001769
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001770 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001771 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001772 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001773 continue;
1774
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001775 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1776 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1777 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1778 return false;
1779
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001780 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001781 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1782 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1783 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001784 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1785
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001786 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1787 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001788 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001789 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1790 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001791 unsigned MaxCost =
1792 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001793 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001794 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001795
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001796 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1797 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1798 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001799 // constant expression.
1800 ++SpeculationCost;
1801 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001802 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001803 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001804
1805 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1806 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001807 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001808 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001809
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001810 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001811 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001812
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001813 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1814 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001815 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001816 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1817 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1818 if (Invert)
1819 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001820 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1821 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001822 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1823 }
1824
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001825 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1826 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001827 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001828 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1829
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001830 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001831 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1832 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001833
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001834 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001835 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001836 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1837 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1838 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1839 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1840 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1841 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1842
1843 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1844 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1845 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001846
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001847 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001848 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1849 // destinations were inverted.
1850 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001851 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001852 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001853 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1854 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001855 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1856 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001857 }
1858
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001859 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001860 return true;
1861}
1862
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001863/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001864static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1865 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001866 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001867
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001868 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001869 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1870 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001871 if (Size > 10)
1872 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001873 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001874
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001875 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001876 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001877 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1878 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001879 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1880 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001881 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001882
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001883 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1884 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001885
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001886 return true;
1887}
1888
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001889/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1890/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1891/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001892static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001893 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1894 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001895 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1896 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001897 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1898 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001899
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001900 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1901 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001902 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001903 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001904 }
1905
1906 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001907 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1908 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001909
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001910 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00001911 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001912 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1913 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1914 }))
1915 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001916
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001917 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1918 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001919 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001920 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001921 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1922 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001923
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001924 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1925 // branch to RealDest.
1926 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1927 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001928
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001929 if (RealDest == BB)
1930 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001931 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001932 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1933 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001934
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001935 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1936 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1937 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1938 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001939 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1940 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1941 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001942 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001943
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001944 // Update PHI nodes.
1945 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001946
1947 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1948 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1949 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1950 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001951 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001952 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1953 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1954 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1955 continue;
1956 }
1957 // Clone the instruction.
1958 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001959 if (BBI->hasName())
1960 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001961
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001962 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001963 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
1964 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001965 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1966 *i = PI->second;
1967 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001968
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001969 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001970 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001971 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1972 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
1973 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
1974 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
1975 N = nullptr;
1976 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001977 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001978 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001979 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001980 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001981 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1982 if (N)
1983 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001984 }
1985
1986 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1987 // to EdgeBB instead.
1988 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1989 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1990 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1991 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1992 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1993 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001994
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001995 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001996 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001997 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001998
1999 return false;
2000}
2001
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002002/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2003/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002004static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2005 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002006 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2007 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2008 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2009 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2010 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2011 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002012 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2013 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2014 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002015 if (!IfCond ||
2016 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2017 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2018 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002019
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002020 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2021 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2022 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2023 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2024 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2025 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2026 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2027 if (NumPhis > 2)
2028 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002029
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002030 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2031 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2032 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002033 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002034 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2035 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002036 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2037 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002038
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002039 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2040 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002041 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002042 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002043 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002044 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002045 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002046
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002047 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002048 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002049 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002050 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002051 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002052 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002053
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002054 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002055 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2056 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002057 if (!PN)
2058 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002059
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002060 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2061 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2062 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2063 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2064 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2065 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2066 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002067
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002068 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2069 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2070 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2071 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002072 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002073 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2074 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2075 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002076 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002077 } else {
2078 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002079 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2080 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002081 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002082 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002083 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2084 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002085 return false;
2086 }
2087 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002088
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002089 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002090 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002091 } else {
2092 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002093 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2094 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002095 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002096 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002097 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2098 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002099 return false;
2100 }
2101 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002102
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002103 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002104 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002105
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002106 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2107 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002108 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002109 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002110
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002111 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2112 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002113 if (IfBlock1) {
2114 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2115 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002116 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002117 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002118 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002119 }
2120 if (IfBlock2) {
2121 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2122 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002123 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002124 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002125 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002126 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002127
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002128 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2129 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002130 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002131 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002133 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2134 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2135 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002136 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002137 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002138
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002139 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2140 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2141 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2142 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002143 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2144 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002145 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002146 return true;
2147}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002148
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002149/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2150/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002151/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002152static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002153 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002154 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2155 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2156 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2157 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2158 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002159
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002160 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2161 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2162 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002163 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002164 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002165 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002166 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002167
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002168 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002169 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2170 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2171 // branch into a return.
2172 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2173 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2174 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002175 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002176 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002177 return true;
2178 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002180 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2181 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2182 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2183 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002184
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002185 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2186 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2187 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2188 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2189 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2190 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2191 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002192
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002193 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2194 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2195 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2196 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2197 // safe.
2198 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2199 if (TCV->canTrap())
2200 return false;
2201 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2202 if (FCV->canTrap())
2203 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002204
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002205 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2206 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2207 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2208 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002209
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002210 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2211 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002212 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002213 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002214 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2215 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2216 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2217 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002218 TrueValue =
2219 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002220 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002221 }
2222
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002223 Value *RI =
2224 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002225
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002226 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002227
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002228 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002229 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002230 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002231
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002232 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2233
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002234 return true;
2235}
2236
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002237/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002238/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002239static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002240 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2241 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002242 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2243 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002244 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2245 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2246 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2247 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2248 return true;
2249 }
2250 }
2251 return false;
2252}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002253
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002254/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2255/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2256/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2257static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2258 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2259 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2260 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2261 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2262 bool PredHasWeights =
2263 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2264 bool SuccHasWeights =
2265 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2266 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2267 if (!PredHasWeights)
2268 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2269 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2270 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2271 return true;
2272 } else {
2273 return false;
2274 }
2275}
2276
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002277/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2278/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2279/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002280bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002281 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002282
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002283 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002284 if (BI->isConditional())
2285 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2286 else {
2287 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2288 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2289 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2290 // predecessor.
2291 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2292 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2293 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2294 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2295 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002296 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002297 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002298 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2299 Cond = Curr;
2300 break;
2301 }
2302 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2303 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2304 return false;
2305 }
2306 }
2307
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002308 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002309 return false;
2310 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002311
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002312 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2313 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002314 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002315
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002316 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002317 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002318
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002319 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002320 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2321 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002322
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002323 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002324 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002325
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002326 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2327 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2328 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2329 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2330 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2331 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002332 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002333 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2334 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2335 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002336 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002337 return false;
2338 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2339 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2340 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2341 return false;
2342 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2343 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2344 // and Cond.
2345 ++NumBonusInsts;
2346 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2347 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2348 return false;
2349 }
2350
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002351 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2352 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2353 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2354 if (CE->canTrap())
2355 return false;
2356 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2357 if (CE->canTrap())
2358 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002359
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002360 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002361 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002362 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002363 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2364 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002365
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002366 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2367 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002368 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002369
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002370 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2371 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2372 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002373 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002374 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002375 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002376 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2377 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002378 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002379
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002380 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002381 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002382 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002383
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002384 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002385 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002386 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002387 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002388 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002389 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2390 Opc = Instruction::And;
2391 InvertPredCond = true;
2392 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2393 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2394 InvertPredCond = true;
2395 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002396 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002397 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002398 } else {
2399 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2400 continue;
2401 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002402
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002403 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002404 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002405
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002406 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2407 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002408 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002409
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002410 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2411 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2412 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2413 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002414 NewCond =
2415 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002416 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002417
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002418 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002419 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002420 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002421
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002422 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002423 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002424 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2425 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2426 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002427 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002428 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002429 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002430 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2431 continue;
2432 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2433 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002434 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002435 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002436
2437 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2438 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2439 // only given the branch precondition.
2440 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2441 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002442 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002443
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002444 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2445 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002446 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002447 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002448
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002449 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2450 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002451 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002452 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002453 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002454 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002455 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002456 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002457
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002458 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002459 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2460 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002461 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2462
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002463 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002464 bool HasWeights =
2465 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2466 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002467 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2468
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002469 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002470 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002471 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2472 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002473 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002474 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002475 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002476 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2477 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2478 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002479 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2480 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2481 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002482 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002483 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2484 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2485 }
2486 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002487 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002488 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2489 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002490 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002491 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002492 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2493 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2494 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2495 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002496 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2497 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002498 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2499 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2500 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002501 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2502 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2503 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2504
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002505 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2506 NewWeights.end());
2507 PBI->setMetadata(
2508 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2509 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002510 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002511 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002512 } else {
2513 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2514 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002515 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002516 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002517 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002518 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002519 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2520 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2521 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2522 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002523 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2524 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2525 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2526 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002527 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002528 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2529 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002530 } else {
2531 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2532 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2533 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002534 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2535 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002536 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002537 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2538 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2539 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2540 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002541 }
2542 }
2543 // Update PHI Node.
2544 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2545 MergedCond);
2546 }
2547 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2548 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2549 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2550 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002551 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002552
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002553 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2554 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2555
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002556 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002557 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2558 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2559 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002560
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002561 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002562 }
2563 return false;
2564}
2565
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002566// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2567// nullptr.
2568static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2569 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2570 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2571 if (!BB)
2572 continue;
2573 for (auto &I : *BB)
2574 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2575 if (S)
2576 // Multiple stores seen.
2577 return nullptr;
2578 else
2579 S = SI;
2580 }
2581 }
2582 return S;
2583}
2584
2585static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2586 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2587 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2588 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2589 //
2590 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2591 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2592 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2593 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2594 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2595 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2596 // one.
2597 //
2598 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2599 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2600 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2601 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2602 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002603
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002604 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2605 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2606 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2607 if (!AlternativeV)
2608 break;
2609
2610 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2611 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2612 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2613 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2614 break;
2615 PHI = nullptr;
2616 }
2617 if (PHI)
2618 return PHI;
2619
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002620 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2621 if (!AlternativeV &&
2622 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2623 return V;
2624
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002625 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002626 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2627 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2628 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002629 PHI->addIncoming(
2630 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002631 return PHI;
2632}
2633
2634static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2635 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2636 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2637 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2638 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2639 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2640 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2641 };
2642
2643 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2644 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2645 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2646 if (!BB)
2647 return true;
2648 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2649 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2650 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002651 unsigned N = 0;
2652 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2653 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2654 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2655 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2656 ++N;
2657 // Free instructions.
2658 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2659 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2660 continue;
2661 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002662 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002663 }
2664 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002665 };
2666
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002667 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2668 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2669 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002670 return false;
2671
2672 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2673 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2674 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2675 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2676 // testing.
2677 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2678 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2679 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2680 return false;
2681
2682 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2683 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2684 return false;
2685
2686 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2687 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2688 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2689 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2690 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2691 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2692 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2693 //
2694 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2695 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2696 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2697 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2698 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2699 return false;
2700 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2701 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2702 return false;
2703 if (QTB)
2704 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2705 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2706 return false;
2707 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2708 I != E; ++I)
2709 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2710 return false;
2711
2712 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2713 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2714 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2715 ->getCondition();
2716 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2717 ->getCondition();
2718
2719 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2720 PStore->getParent());
2721 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2722 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2723
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002724 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2725
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002726 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2727 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2728
2729 if (InvertPCond)
2730 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2731 if (InvertQCond)
2732 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2733 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2734
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002735 auto *T =
2736 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002737 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2738 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2739 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2740 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2741 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2742 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2743
2744 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2745 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002746
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002747 return true;
2748}
2749
2750static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2751 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2752 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2753 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2754 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2755 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2756 // PBI and QBI.
2757 //
2758 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2759 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2760 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2761 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2762 //
2763 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2764 //
2765 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2766 // / \ | \
2767 // PTB PFB | PFB
2768 // \ / | /
2769 // QBI QBI
2770 // / \ | \
2771 // QTB QFB | QFB
2772 // \ / | /
2773 // PostBB PostBB
2774 //
2775 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2776 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2777 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002778 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002779 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2780 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2781 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2782 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2783 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2784
2785 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2786 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2787 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2788 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2789 InvertPCond = true;
2790 }
2791 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2792 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2793 InvertQCond = true;
2794 }
2795
2796 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2797 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2798 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2799 PTB = nullptr;
2800 if (QTB == PostBB)
2801 QTB = nullptr;
2802
2803 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2804 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2805 // predecessor.
2806 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002807 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002808 };
2809 if (!PostBB ||
2810 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2811 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2812 return false;
2813 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2814 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2815 return false;
2816 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2817 return false;
2818
2819 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2820 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002821 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002822 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2823 if (!BB)
2824 continue;
2825 for (auto &I : *BB)
2826 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2827 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2828 }
2829 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2830 if (!BB)
2831 continue;
2832 for (auto &I : *BB)
2833 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2834 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2835 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002836
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002837 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2838 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2839 // clear what it contains.
2840 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2841
2842 bool Changed = false;
2843 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2844 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2845 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2846 return Changed;
2847}
2848
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002849/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2850/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002851/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2852/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002853static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2854 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002855 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2856 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002857
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002858 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002859 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002860 // this conditional branch redundant.
2861 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2862 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2863 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2864 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2865 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2866 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2867 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002868 BI->setCondition(
2869 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2870 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002871 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002872
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002873 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2874 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2875 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2876 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002877 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002878 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2879 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2880 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002881 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2882 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2883 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002884 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002885 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002886 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2887 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002888 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2889 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002890 NewPN->addIncoming(
2891 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2892 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002893 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002894 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002895 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002896 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002897
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002898 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002899 return true;
2900 }
2901 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002902
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002903 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2904 if (CE->canTrap())
2905 return false;
2906
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002907 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2908 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2909 // merged store at the end.
2910 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2911 return true;
2912
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002913 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002914 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002915 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002916 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2917 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2918 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2919 ++BBI;
2920 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002921 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002922
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002923 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002924 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2925 PBIOp = 0;
2926 BIOp = 0;
2927 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2928 PBIOp = 0;
2929 BIOp = 1;
2930 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2931 PBIOp = 1;
2932 BIOp = 0;
2933 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2934 PBIOp = 1;
2935 BIOp = 1;
2936 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002937 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002938 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002939
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002940 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2941 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2942 // keep getting unwound.
2943 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2944 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002945
2946 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002947 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2948 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002949
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002950 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2951 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2952 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2953
2954 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002955 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002956 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2957 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002958 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2959 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002960
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002961 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2962 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2963 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2964 if (CE->canTrap())
2965 return false;
2966
2967 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2968 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2969 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2970 if (CE->canTrap())
2971 return false;
2972 }
2973
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002974 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002975 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002976
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002977 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002978 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002979
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002980 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2981 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2982 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2983 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2984 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2985 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2986 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2987 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2988 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2989 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002990 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
2991 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002992 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2993 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002994 }
2995
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002996 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002997
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002998 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2999 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003000
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003001 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3002 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003003 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003004 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003005 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003006
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003007 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3008 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003009 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003010
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003011 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003012 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003013
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003014 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3015 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3016 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3017 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003018
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003019 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3020 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003021 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003022 bool HasWeights =
3023 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3024 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003025 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003026 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3027 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3028 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3029 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003030 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3031 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3032 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003033 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3034 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3035 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003036 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003037 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3038
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003039 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003040 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3041 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003042 }
3043
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003044 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3045 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003046 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003047
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003048 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3049 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3050 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3051 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003052 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003053 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3054 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3055 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3056 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3057 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3058 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3059 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003060 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3061 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003062 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003063 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3064 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3065 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3066 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003067 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003068 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3069 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3070 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3071 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3072 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3073 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3074 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3075 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3076
3077 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3078
3079 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3080 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3081 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3082 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003083 }
3084 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003085
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003086 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3087 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003088
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003089 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3090 // one fewer predecessor.
3091 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003092}
3093
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003094// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3095// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003096// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3097// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3098// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3099static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003100 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3101 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003102 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003103 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3104 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3105 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3106 // successor.
3107 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003108 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003109
3110 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003111 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003112 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3113 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003114 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003115 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003116 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003117 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003118 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3119 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003120 }
3121
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003122 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3123 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3124
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003125 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003126 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003127 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3128 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3129 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003130 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003131 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003132 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3133 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003134 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3135 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3136 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003137 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3138 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003139 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003140 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3141 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3142 // terminator must be unreachable.
3143 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3144 } else {
3145 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3146 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3147 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003148 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003149 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003150 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003151 else
3152 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003153 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003154 }
3155
3156 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3157 return true;
3158}
3159
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003160// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003161// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3162// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3163// unconditional otherwise.
3164static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3165 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3166 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3167 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3168 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3169 return false;
3170
3171 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3172 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003173 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3174 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003175
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003176 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3177 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3178 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3179 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3180 if (HasWeights) {
3181 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3182 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003183 TrueWeight =
3184 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3185 FalseWeight =
3186 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003187 }
3188 }
3189
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003190 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003191 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3192 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003193}
3194
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003195// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003196// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3197// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3198// with
3199// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3200static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3201 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3202 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3203 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3204 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3205 return false;
3206
3207 // Extract the actual blocks.
3208 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3209 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3210
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003211 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003212 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3213 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003214}
3215
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003216/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3217/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003218/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3219/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3220/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3221/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3222/// like:
3223///
3224/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3225/// DEFAULT:
3226/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3227/// br label %end
3228/// end:
3229/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003230///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003231/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3232/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003233static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003234 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3235 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3236 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003237 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003238
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003239 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3240 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003241 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3242 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003243
3244 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3245 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003246
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003247 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3248 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3249 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3250 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003251 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3252 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003253
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003254 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3255 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3256 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003257
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003258 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3259 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3260 // away.
3261 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3262 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3263 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3264 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003265
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003266 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003267 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003268 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3269 }
3270 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003271 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003272 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003274 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3275 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3276 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003277 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003278 Value *V;
3279 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3280 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3281 else
3282 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003283
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003284 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3285 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3286 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003287 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003288 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003289
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003290 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3291 // the block.
3292 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003293 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003294 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003295 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3296 return false;
3297
3298 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3299 // true in the PHI.
3300 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003301 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003302
3303 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3304 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3305
3306 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3307 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3308 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3309 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3310
3311 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3312 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003313 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3314 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003315 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3316 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3317 if (HasWeights) {
3318 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3319 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3320 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003321 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003322 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3323
3324 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003325 SI->setMetadata(
3326 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3327 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003328 }
3329 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003330 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003331
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003332 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003333 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3334 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3335 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003336 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3337 return true;
3338}
3339
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003340/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003341/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3342/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003343static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3344 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003345 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003346 if (!Cond)
3347 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003348
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003349 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3350 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3351 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003352
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003353 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003354 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3355 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003356 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003357 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3358 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3359 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003360
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003361 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003362 if (!CompVal)
3363 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003364
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003365 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3366 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3367 return false;
3368
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003369 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3370
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003371 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3372 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3373 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3374 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003375
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003376 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003377 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003378 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3379 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003380
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003381 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3382 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3383
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003384 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3385 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003386 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3387 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3388 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003389
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003390 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003391
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003392 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003393 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3394 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003395
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003396 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3397 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3398 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3399 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003400 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3401 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003402 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3403 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003404 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3405
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003406 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003407 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003408 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003409 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003410
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003411 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003412
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003413 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3414 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003415 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003416
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003417 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003418 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003419 BB = NewBB;
3420 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003421
3422 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003423 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3424 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003425 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3426 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003427 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003428
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003429 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003430 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003431
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003432 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3433 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3434 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003435
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003436 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3437 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3438 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003439 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003440 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3441 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003442 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003443 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3444 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003445
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003446 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3447 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003448
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003449 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003450 return true;
3451}
3452
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003453bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003454 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3455 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3456 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3457 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3458 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3459 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003460
3461 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003462}
3463
3464// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3465bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3466 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3467
3468 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3469 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3470 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003471 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003472 while (++I != E)
3473 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3474 return false;
3475
3476 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3477 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3478
3479 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003480 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3481 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003482 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3483 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3484
3485 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3486 // it has other dependents.
3487 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3488 continue;
3489
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003490 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003491 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3492 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3493 continue;
3494
3495 bool isTrivial = true;
3496
3497 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3498 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3499 while (++I != E)
3500 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3501 isTrivial = false;
3502 break;
3503 }
3504
3505 if (isTrivial)
3506 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3507 }
3508
3509 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003510 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3511 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003512
3513 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3514 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3515 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3516 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3517 // to remove them all.
3518 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3519 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3520
3521 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3522 PI != PE;) {
3523 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3524 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3525 }
3526
3527 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3528 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3529 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3530 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3531 // predecessors.
3532 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3533 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3534 }
3535
3536 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3537 if (pred_empty(BB))
3538 BB->eraseFromParent();
3539
3540 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3541}
3542
3543// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3544bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003545 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3546 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003547 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3548 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003549
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003550 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3551 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003552 while (++I != E)
3553 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3554 return false;
3555
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003556 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003557 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3558 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3559 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003560 }
3561
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003562 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3563 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003564 if (LoopHeaders)
3565 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003566 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003567}
3568
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003569static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003570 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3571 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3572 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3573 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3574 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3575 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3576 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3577 // simplified.
3578 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003579 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3580 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003581 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3582 return false;
3583
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003584 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3585 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3586 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3587 return false;
3588
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003589 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003590 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003591 while (++I != E) {
3592 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3593 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003594 return false;
3595
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003596 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3597 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3598 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3599 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3600 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3601 break;
3602 default:
3603 return false;
3604 }
3605 }
3606
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003607 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3608 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003609 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003610 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003611
3612 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3613 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3614 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3615 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3616 // are both EH pads).
3617 if (UnwindDest) {
3618 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3619 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003620 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003621 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003622 I != IE; ++I) {
3623 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003624
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003625 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003626 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003627 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003628 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3629 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3630 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3631 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3632 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3633 // pad being removed.
3634 //
3635 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3636 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3637 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3638 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3639 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3640 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3641
3642 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3643 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3644
3645 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3646 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3647 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3648 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003649 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003650 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003651 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3652 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3653 }
3654 } else {
3655 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3656 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3657 // predecessors with this value.
3658 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3659 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3660 }
3661 }
3662 }
3663
3664 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003665 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003666 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3667 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003668 I != IE;) {
3669 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3670 // being moved to another block.
3671 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3672 if (PN->use_empty())
3673 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3674 // when we erase BB below.
3675 continue;
3676
3677 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3678 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3679 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3680 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3681 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3682 if (pred != BB)
3683 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3684 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3685 }
3686 }
3687
3688 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3689 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3690 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003691 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003692 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003693 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003694 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003695 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003696 }
3697 }
3698
3699 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3700 BB->eraseFromParent();
3701 return true;
3702}
3703
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003704// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3705static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3706 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3707 // with.
3708 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3709 if (!UnwindDest)
3710 return false;
3711
3712 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3713 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3714 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3715 return false;
3716
3717 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3718 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3719 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3720 return false;
3721
3722 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3723 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3724 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3725 // funclet bundle operands.
3726 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3727 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3728 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3729 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3730 // destination.
3731 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3732 RI->eraseFromParent();
3733
3734 return true;
3735}
3736
3737bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003738 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3739 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3740 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3741 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3742 return false;
3743
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003744 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003745 return true;
3746
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003747 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003748 return true;
3749
3750 return false;
3751}
3752
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003753bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003754 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003755 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3756 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003757
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003758 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003759 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3760 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003761 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3762 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003763 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3764 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3765 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3766 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3767 else
3768 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3769 }
3770 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003771
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003772 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003773 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003774 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3775 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3776 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003777 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003778 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003780
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003781 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003782 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003783 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3784 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003785 if (LoopHeaders)
3786 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003787 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003788
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003789 return true;
3790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003791
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003792 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3793 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3794 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3795 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3796 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003797
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003798 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3799 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3800 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003801 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003802 return true;
3803 }
3804 return false;
3805}
3806
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003807bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3808 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003809
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003810 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003811
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003812 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3813 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003814 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3815 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003816 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003817 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3818 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3819 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003820 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3821 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003822
3823 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003824 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003825 if (SI->isVolatile())
3826 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003827 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003828 if (LI->isVolatile())
3829 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003830 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003831 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3832 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003833 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003834 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3835 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003836 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3837 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3838 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3839 // default.
3840 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3841 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3842 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3843 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003844 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3845 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003846 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003847 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003848 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3849 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3850 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3851 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003852 }
3853
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003854 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3855 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3856 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003857 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003858 Changed = true;
3859 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003860
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003861 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3862 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003863 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3864 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003865
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003866 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003867 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3868 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003869 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003870 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003871 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3872 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3873 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3874 TI->eraseFromParent();
3875 Changed = true;
3876 }
3877 } else {
3878 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003879 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003880 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3881 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003882 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003883 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3884 Changed = true;
3885 }
3886 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003887 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003888 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3889 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003890 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003891 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3892 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003893 --i;
3894 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003895 Changed = true;
3896 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003897 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3898 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3899 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3900 Changed = true;
3901 }
3902 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3903 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3904 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3905 Changed = true;
3906 continue;
3907 }
3908
3909 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3910 E = CSI->handler_end();
3911 I != E; ++I) {
3912 if (*I == BB) {
3913 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3914 --I;
3915 --E;
3916 Changed = true;
3917 }
3918 }
3919 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3920 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3921 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3922 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3923 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3924 } else {
3925 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3926 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3927 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3928 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3929 }
3930 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3931 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3932 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3933 Changed = true;
3934 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003935 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003936 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3937 TI->eraseFromParent();
3938 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003939 }
3940 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003941
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003942 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003943 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003944 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3945 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003946 if (LoopHeaders)
3947 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003948 return true;
3949 }
3950
3951 return Changed;
3952}
3953
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003954static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3955 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3956
3957 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3958 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3959 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3960 return false;
3961 }
3962 return true;
3963}
3964
3965/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3966/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003967static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003968 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003969
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003970 bool HasDefault =
3971 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003972
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003973 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3974 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3975 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003976 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3977 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003978
3979 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3980 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003981 if (!DestA)
3982 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003983 if (Dest == DestA) {
3984 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3985 continue;
3986 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003987 if (!DestB)
3988 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003989 if (Dest == DestB) {
3990 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3991 continue;
3992 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003993 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003994 }
3995
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003996 assert(DestA && DestB &&
3997 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003998 assert(DestA != DestB);
3999 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4000 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4001 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4002
4003 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4004 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4005 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4006 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4007 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4008 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4009 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4010 OtherDest = DestB;
4011 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4012 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4013 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4014 OtherDest = DestA;
4015 } else
4016 return false;
4017
4018 // Start building the compare and branch.
4019
4020 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004021 Constant *NumCases =
4022 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004023
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004024 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4025 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004026 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4027
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004028 Value *Cmp;
4029 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004030 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004031 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4032 else
4033 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004034 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004035
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004036 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004037 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4038 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004039 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4040 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004041 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4042 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4043 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4044 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4045 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4046 else
4047 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4048 }
4049 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4050 TrueWeight /= 2;
4051 FalseWeight /= 2;
4052 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004053 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004054 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4055 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4056 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004057 }
4058 }
4059
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004060 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4061 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4062 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004063 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4064 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004065 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004066 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4067 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004068 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4069 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004070 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4071 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004072 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4073 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4074 }
4075
4076 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004077 SI->eraseFromParent();
4078
4079 return true;
4080}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004081
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004082/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004083/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004084static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4085 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004086 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004087 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004088 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004089 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004090
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004091 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4092 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4093 // bits are in the condition value.
4094 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4095 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4096
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004097 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004098 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004099 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004100 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4101 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4102 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004103 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004104 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004105 }
4106 }
4107
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004108 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4109 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004110 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4111 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004112 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004113 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4114 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4115 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004116 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004117 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004118 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004119 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004120 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004121 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4122 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004123 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4124 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004125 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4126 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4127 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4128 return true;
4129 }
4130
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004131 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4132 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4133 if (HasWeight) {
4134 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4135 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4136 }
4137
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004138 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004139 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4140 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004141 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004142 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004143 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004144 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004145 Weights.pop_back();
4146 }
4147
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004148 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004149 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004150 SI->removeCase(Case);
4151 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004152 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004153 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4154 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004155 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4156 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004157 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004158
4159 return !DeadCases.empty();
4160}
4161
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004162/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4163/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004164/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4165/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4166/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4167static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004168 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004169 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004170 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004171 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004172 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004173
4174 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4175 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004176 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004177
4178 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4179
4180 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4181 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4182 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4183 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4184
4185 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004186 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4187 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004188
4189 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4190 return PHI;
4191 }
4192
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004193 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004194}
4195
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004196/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4197/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4198/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004199/// Returns true if a change is made.
4200static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004201 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004202 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4203
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004204 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4205 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004206 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4207 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004208
4209 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004210 PHINode *PHI =
4211 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4212 if (!PHI)
4213 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004214
4215 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4216 }
4217
4218 bool Changed = false;
4219
4220 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004221 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4222 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004223 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004224 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004225
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004226 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4227 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004228
4229 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4230 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4231 Changed = true;
4232 }
4233
4234 return Changed;
4235}
4236
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004237/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004238/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004239static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004240 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4241 return false;
4242 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4243 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004244
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004245 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4246 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4247
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004248 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4249 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4250 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004251}
4252
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004253/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004254/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004255static Constant *
4256LookupConstant(Value *V,
4257 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004258 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4259 return C;
4260 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4261}
4262
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004263/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004264/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4265/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004266/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004267static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004268ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4269 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004270 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004271 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4272 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004273 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004274 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4275 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4276 if (A->isNullValue())
4277 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004278 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004279 }
4280
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004281 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4282 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4283 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4284 COps.push_back(A);
4285 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004286 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004287 }
4288
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004289 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004290 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4291 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004292 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004293
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004294 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004295}
4296
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004297/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004298/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004299/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004300/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004301static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004302GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004303 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004304 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4305 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004306 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4307 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4308
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004309 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4310 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004311 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004312 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4313 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4314 ++I) {
4315 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4316 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4317 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4318 return false;
4319 Pred = CaseDest;
4320 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4321 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4322 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4323 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004324 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004325 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004326
4327 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4328 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4329 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4330 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4331 User *User = Use.getUser();
4332 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4333 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4334 continue;
4335 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4336 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4337 continue;
4338 return false;
4339 }
4340
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004341 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004342 } else {
4343 break;
4344 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004345 }
4346
4347 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4348 if (!*CommonDest)
4349 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4350 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4351 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4352 return false;
4353
4354 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4355 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4356 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4357 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4358 if (Idx == -1)
4359 continue;
4360
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004361 Constant *ConstVal =
4362 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004363 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004364 return false;
4365
4366 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4367 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4368 return false;
4369
4370 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4371 }
4372
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004373 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004374}
4375
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004376// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4377// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004378static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004379 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4380 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004381 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4382 if (I.first == Result) {
4383 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4384 return;
4385 }
4386 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004387 UniqueResults.push_back(
4388 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004389}
4390
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004391// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004392// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4393// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4394// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004395static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4396 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4397 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4398 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4399 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004400 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4401 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4402
4403 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4404 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4405 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4406 DL))
4407 return false;
4408
4409 // Only one value per case is permitted
4410 if (Results.size() > 1)
4411 return false;
4412 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4413
4414 // Check the PHI consistency.
4415 if (!PHI)
4416 PHI = Results[0].first;
4417 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4418 return false;
4419 }
4420 // Find the default result value.
4421 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4422 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4423 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4424 DL);
4425 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4426 // is unreachable.
4427 DefaultResult =
4428 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4429 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004430 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004431 return false;
4432
4433 return true;
4434}
4435
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004436// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4437// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004438// Example:
4439// switch (a) {
4440// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4441// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4442// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4443// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4444// default:
4445// return 4;
4446// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004447static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4448 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4449 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004450 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004451 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004452 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4453 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4454 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4455 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4456 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4457 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4458
4459 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4460 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4461 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4462 Value *const ValueCompare =
4463 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4464 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4465 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4466 }
4467 Value *const ValueCompare =
4468 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004469 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4470 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004471 }
4472
4473 return nullptr;
4474}
4475
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004476// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4477// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004478static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4479 Value *SelectValue,
4480 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4481 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4482 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4483 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4484 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4485
4486 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4487
4488 // Remove the switch.
4489 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4490 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4491
4492 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4493 continue;
4494 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4495 }
4496 SI->eraseFromParent();
4497}
4498
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004499/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004500/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4501/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4502static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004503 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004504 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4505 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4506 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4507 Constant *DefaultResult;
4508 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4509 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004510 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4511 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004512 return false;
4513 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4514 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4515 return false;
4516 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4517
4518 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004519 Value *SelectValue =
4520 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004521 if (SelectValue) {
4522 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4523 return true;
4524 }
4525 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4526 return false;
4527}
4528
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004529namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004530/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4531class SwitchLookupTable {
4532public:
4533 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4534 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4535 SwitchLookupTable(
4536 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4537 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4538 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004539
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004540 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4541 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4542 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004543
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004544 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4545 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4546 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4547 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004548
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004549private:
4550 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4551 // different ways.
4552 enum {
4553 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4554 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4555 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004556
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004557 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4558 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4559 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4560 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004561
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004562 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4563 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4564 // shift and mask operations.
4565 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004566
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004567 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4568 // instructions from the table.
4569 ArrayKind
4570 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004571
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004572 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4573 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004574
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004575 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4576 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4577 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004578
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004579 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4580 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4581 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004582
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004583 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4584 GlobalVariable *Array;
4585};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004586}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004587
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004588SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4589 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4590 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4591 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004592 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004593 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004594 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4595 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004596
4597 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004598 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004599
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004600 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4601
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004602 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004603 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004604 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4605 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4606 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004607 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004608
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004609 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004610 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4611
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004612 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004613 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004614 }
4615
4616 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004617 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004618 assert(DefaultValue &&
4619 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004620 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004621 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4622 if (!TableContents[I])
4623 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004624 }
4625
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004626 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004627 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004628 }
4629
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004630 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4631 // that single value.
4632 if (SingleValue) {
4633 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4634 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004635 }
4636
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004637 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4638 // table index.
4639 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4640 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4641 APInt PrevVal;
4642 APInt DistToPrev;
4643 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4644 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4645 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4646 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4647 if (!ConstVal) {
4648 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4649 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4650 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4651 break;
4652 }
4653 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4654 if (I != 0) {
4655 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4656 if (I == 1) {
4657 DistToPrev = Dist;
4658 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4659 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4660 break;
4661 }
4662 }
4663 PrevVal = Val;
4664 }
4665 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4666 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4667 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4668 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4669 ++NumLinearMaps;
4670 return;
4671 }
4672 }
4673
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004674 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004675 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004676 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004677 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4678 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4679 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004680 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4681 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4682 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4683 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4684 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004685 }
4686 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4687 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4688 Kind = BitMapKind;
4689 ++NumBitMaps;
4690 return;
4691 }
4692
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004693 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004694 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004695 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4696
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004697 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4698 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004699 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004700 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004701 Kind = ArrayKind;
4702}
4703
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004704Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004705 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004706 case SingleValueKind:
4707 return SingleValue;
4708 case LinearMapKind: {
4709 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4710 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4711 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4712 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4713 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4714 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4715 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4716 return Result;
4717 }
4718 case BitMapKind: {
4719 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4720 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004721
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004722 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4723 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4724 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4725 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004726
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004727 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4728 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4729 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4730 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004731
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004732 // Shift down.
4733 Value *DownShifted =
4734 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4735 // Mask off.
4736 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4737 }
4738 case ArrayKind: {
4739 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4740 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4741 uint64_t TableSize =
4742 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4743 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4744 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4745 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4746 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004747
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004748 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4749 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4750 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4751 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4752 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004753 }
4754 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4755}
4756
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004757bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004758 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004759 Type *ElementType) {
4760 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004761 if (!IT)
4762 return false;
4763 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4764 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004765
4766 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004767 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004768 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004769 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004770}
4771
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004772/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4773/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004774static bool
4775ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4776 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4777 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004778 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4779 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004780
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004781 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004782 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004783 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4784 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004785
4786 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004787 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004788
4789 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004790 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4791 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4792 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004793
4794 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4795 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4796 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4797 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004798 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004799 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004800
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004801 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4802 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4803 return true;
4804
4805 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4806 if (HasIllegalType)
4807 return false;
4808
4809 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4810 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4811 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4812 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004813}
4814
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004815/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4816/// \code
4817/// if (idx < tablesize)
4818/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4819/// else
4820/// r = default_value;
4821/// if (r != default_value)
4822/// ...
4823/// \endcode
4824/// Is optimized to:
4825/// \code
4826/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4827/// if (cond)
4828/// r = table[idx];
4829/// else
4830/// r = default_value;
4831/// if (cond)
4832/// ...
4833/// \endcode
4834/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004835static void reuseTableCompare(
4836 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4837 Constant *DefaultValue,
4838 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004839
4840 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4841 if (!CmpInst)
4842 return;
4843
4844 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4845 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4846 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4847 return;
4848
4849 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4850 if (!CmpOp1)
4851 return;
4852
4853 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4854 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4855 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4856
4857 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4858 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4859 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4860 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4861 return;
4862
4863 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4864 // compare result.
4865 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4866 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004867 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004868 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4869 return;
4870 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4871 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4872 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004873
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004874 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4875 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4876 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4877 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4878 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4879 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4880 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4881 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4882 return;
4883 }
4884
4885 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4886 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4887 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4888 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4889 } else {
4890 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004891 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4892 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4893 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004894 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4895 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4896 }
4897}
4898
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004899/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4900/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4901/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004902static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4903 const DataLayout &DL,
4904 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004905 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004906
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004907 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004908 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004909 return false;
4910
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004911 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4912 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4913
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004914 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4915 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4916 // string and lookup indices into that.
4917
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004918 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4919 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004920 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4921 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004922 return false;
4923
4924 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004925 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004926 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4927 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4928 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4929 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4930
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004931 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004932 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4933 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4934 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4935 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4936 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004937
4938 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4939 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4940 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4941 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4942 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4943 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4944
4945 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004946 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004947 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004948 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004949 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004950 return false;
4951
4952 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004953 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4954 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4955 Constant *Value = I.second;
4956 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4957 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4958 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004959 }
4960 }
4961
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004962 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004963 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004964 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4965 }
4966
4967 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4968 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4969 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4970 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4971
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004972 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4973 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004974 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004975 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004976 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004977
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004978 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4979 if (NeedMask) {
4980 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004981 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004982 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004983 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004984 return false;
4985 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004986
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004987 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4988 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4989 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004990 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004991 }
4992
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004993 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004994 return false;
4995
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004996 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004997 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004998 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
4999 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005000
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005001 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005002 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005003 Value *TableIndex =
5004 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005005
5006 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5007 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005008 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005009 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005010 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5011 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5012 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5013
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005014 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5015 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5016 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5017 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5018 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5019 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005020 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5021
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005022 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005023 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005024 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5025 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005026 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005027 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5028 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5029 RangeCheckBranch =
5030 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005031 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005032
5033 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5034 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005035
5036 if (NeedMask) {
5037 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5038 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5039 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5040 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5041 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005042 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5043 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005044
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005045 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5046 // unnecessary illegal types.
5047 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5048 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5049 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005050 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005051 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5052 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005053 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5054 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005055 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5056 }
5057 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5058
5059 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5060 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5061 // else continue with table lookup.
5062 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005063 Value *MaskIndex =
5064 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5065 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5066 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5067 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005068 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5069
5070 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5071 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5072 }
5073
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005074 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5075 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5076 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5077 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5078 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5079 }
5080
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005081 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005082 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5083 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005084 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005085
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005086 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5087 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005088 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005089
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005090 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005091
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005092 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5093 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005094 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5095 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005096 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5097 ReturnedEarly = true;
5098 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005099 }
5100
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005101 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5102 // possible.
5103 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5104 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5105 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5106 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5107 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5108 }
5109 }
5110
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005111 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005112 }
5113
5114 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5115 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5116
5117 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005118 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005119 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005120
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005121 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005122 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005123 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5124 }
5125 SI->eraseFromParent();
5126
5127 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005128 if (NeedMask)
5129 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005130 return true;
5131}
5132
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005133static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5134 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5135 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5136 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5137 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5138 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5139 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005140
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005141 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5142}
5143
5144// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5145// of cases.
5146//
5147// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5148// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5149//
5150// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5151// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5152static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5153 const DataLayout &DL,
5154 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5155 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5156 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5157 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5158 return false;
5159 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5160 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5161 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5162 return false;
5163
5164 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5165 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5166 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5167 // as signed.
5168 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5169 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5170 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5171 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5172
5173 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5174 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5175 return false;
5176
5177 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5178 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5179 for (auto &V : Values)
5180 V -= Base;
5181
5182 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5183 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5184 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5185 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5186 for (auto &V : Values)
5187 GCD = llvm::GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
5188
5189 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5190 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5191 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5192 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5193 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5194 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5195 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5196 // as the key function.
5197 if (GCD <= 1 || !llvm::isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
5198 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5199 return false;
5200
5201 unsigned Shift = llvm::Log2_64(GCD);
5202 for (auto &V : Values)
5203 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5204
5205 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5206 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5207 return false;
5208
5209 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5210 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5211 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5212 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5213 //
5214 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5215 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5216 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5217 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005218
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005219 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5220 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5221 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5222 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005223 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5224 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5225 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005226 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5227
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005228 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5229 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005230 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5231 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005232 C.setValue(
5233 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005234 }
5235 return true;
5236}
5237
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005238bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005239 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5240
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005241 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5242 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5243 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5244 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5245 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005246 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005247
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005248 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5249 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5250 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005251 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005252
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005253 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5254 // away into any preds.
5255 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5256 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5257 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5258 ++BBI;
5259 if (SI == &*BBI)
5260 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005261 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005262 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005263
5264 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005265 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005266 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005267
5268 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005269 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5270 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005271
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005272 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5273 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005274
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005275 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005276 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005277
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005278 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5279 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005280
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005281 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5282 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5283
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005284 return false;
5285}
5286
5287bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5288 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5289 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005290
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005291 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5292 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5293 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5294 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005295 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005296 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5297 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005298 --i;
5299 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005300 Changed = true;
5301 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005302 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005303
5304 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5305 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5306 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5307 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5308 return true;
5309 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005310
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005311 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5312 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5313 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5314 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5315 return true;
5316 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005317
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005318 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5319 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005320 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005321 }
5322 return Changed;
5323}
5324
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005325/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5326/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5327/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5328/// a shared handler.
5329///
5330/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5331/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5332/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5333/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5334/// sinking in this file)
5335///
5336/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5337/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5338/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5339/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5340/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5341/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5342///
5343/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5344/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5345/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5346static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5347 BasicBlock *BB) {
5348 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5349 assert(Succ);
5350 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5351 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5352 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5353 return false;
5354
5355 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5356 if (BB == OtherPred)
5357 continue;
5358 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5359 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5360 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5361 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005362 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5363 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005364 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5365 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5366 continue;
5367
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005368 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005369 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5370 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5371 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5372 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5373 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005374 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5375 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005376 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5377 }
5378
5379 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5380 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005381 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5382 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5383 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005384 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5385 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5386 }
5387
5388 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5389 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5390 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5391 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5392 }
5393
5394 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5395 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5396 BI->eraseFromParent();
5397 return true;
5398 }
5399 return false;
5400}
5401
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005402bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5403 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005404 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005405
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005406 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5407 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005408
5409 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5410 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005411 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5412 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5413 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5414 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005415 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005416 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005417 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005418 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5419 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005420
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005421 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5422 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5423 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5424 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5425 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5426 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005427 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005428 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5429 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005430 return true;
5431 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005432
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005433 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5434 // equivalent.
5435 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005436 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5437 }
5438 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005439 return true;
5440 }
5441
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005442 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5443 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5444 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5445 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005446 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5447 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005448 return false;
5449}
5450
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005451static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5452 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5453 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5454 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5455 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5456 return nullptr;
5457 PredPred = PPred;
5458 }
5459 return PredPred;
5460}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005461
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005462bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005463 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005464
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005465 // Conditional branch
5466 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5467 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5468 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5469 // switch.
5470 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005471 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005472 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005473
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005474 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5475 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5476 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5477 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5478 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5479 ++I;
5480 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005481 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005482 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005483 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005484 ++I;
5485 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5486 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5487 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005488 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005489 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005490 }
5491 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005492
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005493 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005494 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005495 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005496
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005497 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5498 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5499 // of the BI branch.
5500 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5501 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5502 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5503 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5504 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5505 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5506 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5507 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5508 if (Implication) {
5509 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5510 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5511 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5512 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5513 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5514 BI->setCondition(CI);
5515 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5516 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5517 }
5518 }
5519 }
5520
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005521 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5522 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5523 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005524 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5525 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005526
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005527 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5528 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5529 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5530 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005531 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5532 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005533 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5534 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005535 } else {
5536 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005537 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005538 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5539 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5540 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005541 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5542 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005543 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005544 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005545 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005546 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005547 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5548 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5549 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005550 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5551 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005552 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005553
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005554 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5555 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5556 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5557 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005558 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005559 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005560
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005561 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005562 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5563 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005564 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005565 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005566 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005567
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005568 // Look for diamond patterns.
5569 if (MergeCondStores)
5570 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5571 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5572 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5573 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5574 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005575
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005576 return false;
5577}
5578
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005579/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5580static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5581 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5582 if (!C)
5583 return false;
5584
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005585 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005586 return false;
5587
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005588 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005589 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005590 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005591
5592 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5593 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005594 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5595 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5596 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5597 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005598 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005599 return false;
5600
5601 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5602 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5603 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5604 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5605
5606 // Look through bitcasts.
5607 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5608 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5609
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005610 // Load from null is undefined.
5611 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005612 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5613 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005614
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005615 // Store to null is undefined.
5616 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005617 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005618 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5619 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005620
5621 // A call to null is undefined.
5622 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5623 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005624 }
5625 return false;
5626}
5627
5628/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005629/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005630static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5631 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5632 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5633 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5634 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5635 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5636 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5637 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5638 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5639 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5640 // destination from conditional branches.
5641 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5642 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5643 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005644 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5645 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005646 BI->eraseFromParent();
5647 return true;
5648 }
5649 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5650 }
5651
5652 return false;
5653}
5654
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005655bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005656 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005657
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005658 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005659 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005660
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005661 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5662 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005663 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005664 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005665 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5666 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5667 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005668 }
5669
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005670 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5671 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005672 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005673
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005674 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5675 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5676
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005677 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5678 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5679
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005680 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5681 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5682 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5683 //
5684 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5685 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005686
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005687 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5688
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005689 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5690 // eliminate it, do so now.
5691 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5692 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005693 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005694
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005695 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005696 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005697 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005698 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5699 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005700 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005701 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5702 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005703 }
5704 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005705 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5706 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005707 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005708 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5709 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005710 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005711 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5712 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5713 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005714 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005715 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5716 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005717 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005718 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5719 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5720 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005721 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005722 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5723 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5724 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005725 }
5726
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005727 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005728}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005729
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005730/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5731/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005732/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5733/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5734///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005735bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005736 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5737 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005738 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005739 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5740 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005741}